blob: f4ab2fb4d50c445b980e1f6c507ae5a893c1ddfc [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07007 *
8 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
9 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
10 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050016#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070017#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020022#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040024/**
25 * DOC: Introduction
26 *
27 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
28 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
29 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
30 * drivers.
31 */
32
33/**
34 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
35 *
36 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070037 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
38 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
39 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010040 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
41 * tasklet function.
42 *
43 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070044 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070045 */
46
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040047/**
48 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070049 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
51 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
52 */
53
54/**
55 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070056 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040057 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
58 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
59 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
60 * hardware.
61 *
62 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
63 *
64 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
65 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
66 *
67 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
68 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
69 *
70 * Finally, for received frames, the driver is able to indicate that it has
71 * filled a radiotap header and put that in front of the frame; if it does
72 * not do so then mac80211 may add this under certain circumstances.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070073 */
74
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020075/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040076 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 *
78 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 *
83 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84 * suspend.
85 *
86 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87 *
88 */
89
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050090struct device;
91
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040092/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020093 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
94 *
95 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010096 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020097 */
98enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020099 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100100 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200101};
102
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200103#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
104
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200105/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800106 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
108 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
109 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
110 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
111 */
112enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
113 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
114 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
115 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
116 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
117};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200118#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800119
120/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400121 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
122 *
123 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100124 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400125 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400126 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200127 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
128 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400129 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100130 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300131 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200132 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400133 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700134struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100136 u16 cw_min;
137 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200138 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300139 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200140 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700141};
142
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700143struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
144 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
145 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
146 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
147 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
148};
149
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100150/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200151 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200153 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200155 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
156 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200157 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200158 */
159enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100162 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200163 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200164 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200165};
166
167/**
168 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
169 *
170 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
171 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
172 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100173 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200174 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200175 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
176 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
177 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
178 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100179 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100180 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200181 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
182 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
183 */
184struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100185 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200186 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200187
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200188 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
189
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100190 bool radar_enabled;
191
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100192 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200193};
194
195/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100196 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
197 *
198 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
199 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
200 *
201 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
202 * also implies a change in the AID.
203 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
204 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300205 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700206 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200207 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200208 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200209 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
210 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
211 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
212 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
213 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
214 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200215 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200216 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300217 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200218 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
219 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200220 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200221 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200222 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300223 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200224 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100225 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
226 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300227 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
228 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100229 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
230 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
231 * context had been assigned.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100232 */
233enum ieee80211_bss_change {
234 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
235 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
236 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300237 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200238 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200239 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200240 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200241 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
242 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
243 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200244 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200245 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300246 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200247 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200248 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300249 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200250 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300251 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200252 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100253 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300254 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100255 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200256
257 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100258};
259
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300260/*
261 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
262 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
263 * filtering will be disabled.
264 */
265#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
266
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100267/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700268 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
269 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
270 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
271 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
272 */
273enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
274 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
275 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
276};
277
278/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100279 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
280 *
281 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
282 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
283 *
284 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200285 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
286 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530287 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100288 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
289 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200290 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
291 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
292 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
293 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
294 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
295 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100296 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200297 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300298 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200299 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100300 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
301 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
302 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
303 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
304 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200305 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
306 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100307 * (see @sync_tsf)
308 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
309 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700310 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800311 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200312 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
313 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
314 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300315 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100316 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200317 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
318 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100319 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
320 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100321 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200322 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200323 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
324 * implies disabled
325 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300326 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
327 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
328 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
329 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100330 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
331 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
332 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200333 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200334 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
335 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
336 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300337 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
338 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200339 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300340 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
341 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200342 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100343 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100344 */
345struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200346 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100347 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200348 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530349 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100350 u16 aid;
351 /* erp related data */
352 bool use_cts_prot;
353 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300354 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200355 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800356 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700357 u16 beacon_int;
358 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200359 u64 sync_tsf;
360 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100361 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100362 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300363 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100364 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200365 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200366 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
367 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100368 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300369 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100370 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200371 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200372 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300373 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300374 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
375 size_t ssid_len;
376 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200377 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100378 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100379};
380
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800381/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200382 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800383 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700384 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800385 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100386 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200387 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
388 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
389 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
390 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
391 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
392 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
393 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
394 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
395 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
396 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
397 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200398 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200399 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
400 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200401 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200402 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
403 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200404 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200405 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200406 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
407 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
408 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
409 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
410 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
411 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
412 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
413 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200414 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
415 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
416 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300417 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
418 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200419 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
420 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
421 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600422 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
423 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
424 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100425 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
426 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
427 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200428 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
429 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200430 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
431 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100432 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
433 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
434 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200435 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
436 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
437 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
438 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100439 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
440 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
441 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100442 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
443 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
444 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200445 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
446 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
447 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400448 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200449 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
450 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100451 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
452 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
453 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
454 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200455 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
456 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
457 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530458 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
459 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
460 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200461 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
462 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
463 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200464 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
465 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530466 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
467 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
468 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200469 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
470 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
471 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200472 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
473 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200474 *
475 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
476 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800477 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200478enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200479 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200480 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
481 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
482 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
483 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
484 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
485 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
486 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
487 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
488 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
489 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
490 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
491 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600492 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100493 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200494 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200495 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100496 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200497 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100498 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100499 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200500 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400501 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200502 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100503 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200504 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530505 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200506 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530507 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200508 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de22013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200509 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200510};
511
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200512#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
513
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200514/**
515 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
516 *
517 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
518 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
519 *
520 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
521 */
522enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
523 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
524};
525
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200526/*
527 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
528 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
529 */
530#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
533 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
534 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100535 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200536 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200537 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200538
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530539/**
540 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
541 * Rate Control algorithm.
542 *
543 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
544 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
545 *
546 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
547 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
548 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
549 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
550 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100551 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
552 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530553 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
554 * Greenfield mode.
555 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100556 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
557 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
558 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530559 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
560 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
561 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
562 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
563 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200564enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
565 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
566 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
567 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
568
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100569 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200570 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
571 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
572 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
573 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
574 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100575 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
576 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
577 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800578};
579
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200580
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200581/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
582#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200583
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200584/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
585#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
586
587/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200588#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200589
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200590/* maximum number of rate table entries */
591#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
592
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200593/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200594 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200595 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200596 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
597 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200598 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200599 *
600 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
601 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
602 *
603 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
604 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200605 *
606 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
607 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
608 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
609 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
610 * information
611 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
612 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
613 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
614 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
615 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
616 * information should then contain
617 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
618 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
619 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200620 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200621struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
622 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100623 u16 count:5,
624 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000625} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200626
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100627#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
628
629static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
630 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
631{
632 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200633 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
634 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100635}
636
637static inline u8
638ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
639{
640 return rate->idx & 0xF;
641}
642
643static inline u8
644ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
645{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200646 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100647}
648
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200649/**
650 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200651 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200652 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
653 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
654 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
655 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
656 *
657 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200658 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200659 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100660 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700661 * @control: union for control data
662 * @status: union for status data
663 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100664 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700665 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100666 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700667 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200668 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200669 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200670struct ieee80211_tx_info {
671 /* common information */
672 u32 flags;
673 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200674
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200675 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100676
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100677 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100678
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200679 union {
680 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200681 union {
682 /* rate control */
683 struct {
684 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
685 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
686 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200687 u8 use_rts:1;
688 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200689 u8 short_preamble:1;
690 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200691 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200692 };
693 /* only needed before rate control */
694 unsigned long jiffies;
695 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200696 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200697 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
698 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200699 u32 flags;
700 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200701 } control;
702 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200703 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200704 int ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200705 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100706 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200707 u8 antenna;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200708 /* 21 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200709 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200710 struct {
711 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
712 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200713 u8 pad[4];
714
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200715 void *rate_driver_data[
716 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
717 };
718 void *driver_data[
719 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200720 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700721};
722
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300723/**
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -0700724 * struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies - scheduled scan IEs
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300725 *
726 * This structure is used to pass the appropriate IEs to be used in scheduled
727 * scans for all bands. It contains both the IEs passed from the userspace
728 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
729 *
730 * @ie: array with the IEs for each supported band
731 * @len: array with the total length of the IEs for each band
732 */
733struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies {
734 u8 *ie[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
735 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
736};
737
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200738static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
739{
740 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
741}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400742
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200743static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
744{
745 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
746}
747
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200748/**
749 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
750 *
751 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
752 *
753 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
754 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
755 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
756 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
757 *
758 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
759 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
760 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
761 */
762static inline void
763ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
764{
765 int i;
766
767 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
768 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
769 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
770 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
771 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
772 /* clear the rate counts */
773 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
774 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
775
776 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200777 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200778 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
779 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
780 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
781}
782
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400783
784/**
785 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
786 *
787 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
788 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
789 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
790 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400791 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
792 * verification has been done by the hardware.
793 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
794 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
795 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400796 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
797 * the frame.
798 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
799 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800800 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100801 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
802 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
803 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800804 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
805 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
806 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200807 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200808 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100809 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200810 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100811 * @RX_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
812 * @RX_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
813 * @RX_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200814 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100815 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
816 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200817 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
818 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
819 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200820 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
821 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
822 * each A-MPDU
823 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
824 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
825 * monitoring purposes only
826 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
827 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
828 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
829 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
830 * on this subframe
831 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
832 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200833 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200834 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
835 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200836 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
837 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
838 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
839 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
840 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
841 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
842 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
843 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
844 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400845 */
846enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200847 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
848 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
849 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
850 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
851 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
852 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800853 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200854 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
855 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
856 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
857 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
858 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
859 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
860 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
861 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
862 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
863 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
864 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
865 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
866 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800867 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100868 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
869 RX_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(23),
870 RX_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(24),
871 RX_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200872 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200873 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
874 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200875 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400876};
877
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200878#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
879
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400880/**
881 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
882 *
883 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
884 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200885 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200886 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900887 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
888 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200889 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
890 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100891 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400892 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200893 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
894 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
895 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200896 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
897 * values were filled.
898 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
899 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400900 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200901 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100902 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
903 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400904 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200905 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200906 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
907 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
908 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100909 * @vendor_radiotap_bitmap: radiotap vendor namespace presence bitmap
910 * @vendor_radiotap_len: radiotap vendor namespace length
911 * @vendor_radiotap_align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. Note
912 * that the actual data must be at the start of the SKB data
913 * already.
914 * @vendor_radiotap_oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
915 * @vendor_radiotap_subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400916 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700917struct ieee80211_rx_status {
918 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200919 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200920 u32 ampdu_reference;
921 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100922 u32 vendor_radiotap_bitmap;
923 u16 vendor_radiotap_len;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200924 u16 freq;
925 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100926 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200927 u8 rx_flags;
928 u8 band;
929 u8 antenna;
930 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200931 u8 chains;
932 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200933 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Johannes Berg90b9e4462012-11-16 10:09:08 +0100934 u8 vendor_radiotap_align;
935 u8 vendor_radiotap_oui[3];
936 u8 vendor_radiotap_subns;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700937};
938
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400939/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400940 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
941 *
942 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
943 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100944 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
945 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
946 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +0200947 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
948 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
949 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
950 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
951 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
952 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
953 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200954 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
955 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
956 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
957 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
958 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200959 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
960 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400961 */
962enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100963 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +0200964 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200965 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +0200966 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400967};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700968
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200969
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700970/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200971 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
972 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200973 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100974 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200975 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200976 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +0100977 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +0200978 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200979 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100980 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200981 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
982 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200983 */
984enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100985 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200986 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100987 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200988 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +0200989 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
990 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
991 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200992 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +0200993};
994
995/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +0100996 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
997 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200998 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
999 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1000 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1001 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1002 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001003 */
1004enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1005 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1006 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1007 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1008 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1009
1010 /* keep last */
1011 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1012};
1013
1014/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001015 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1016 *
1017 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1018 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001019 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1020 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001021 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001022 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001023 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1024 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1025 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1026 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001027 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1028 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1029 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001030 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1031 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1032 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1033 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001034 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1035 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001036 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001037 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001038 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001039 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001040 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001041 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1042 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001043 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001044 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1045 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001046 *
1047 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1048 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001049 * configured for an HT channel.
1050 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1051 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001052 */
1053struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001054 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001055 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001056 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001057
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001058 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001059 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001060
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001061 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1062
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001063 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001064 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001065 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001066};
1067
1068/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001069 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1070 *
1071 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1072 * operation.
1073 *
1074 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1075 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1076 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1077 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1078 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1079 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001080 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001081 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1082 */
1083struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1084 u64 timestamp;
1085 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001086 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001087 u8 count;
1088};
1089
1090/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001091 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1092 *
1093 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1094 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001095 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1096 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1097 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1098 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001099 */
1100enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1101 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001102 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001103};
1104
1105/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001106 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1107 *
1108 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1109 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1110 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001111 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001112 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1113 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001114 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001115 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1116 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001117 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001118 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1119 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1120 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1121 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001122 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1123 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001124 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1125 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1126 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1127 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1128 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001129 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001130 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001131 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001132 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1133 * sizeof(void *).
1134 */
1135struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001136 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001137 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001138 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001139 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001140 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001141
1142 u8 cab_queue;
1143 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1144
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001145 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1146
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001147 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001148
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001149#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1150 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1151#endif
1152
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001153 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001154 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001155};
1156
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001157static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1158{
1159#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001160 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001161#endif
1162 return false;
1163}
1164
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001165/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001166 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1167 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1168 *
1169 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1170 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1171 *
1172 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1173 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1174 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1175 */
1176struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1177
1178/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001179 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1180 *
1181 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1182 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1183 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001184 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1185 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1186 * particular key.
1187 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1188 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1189 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001190 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1191 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001192 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001193 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1194 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001195 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001196 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001197 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1198 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001199 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1200 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1201 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1202 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1203 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1204 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1205 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001206 */
1207enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001208 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = 1<<1,
1209 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC= 1<<2,
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001210 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = 1<<3,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001211 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = 1<<4,
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001212 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = 1<<5,
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001213 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001214};
1215
1216/**
1217 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1218 *
1219 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1220 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1221 *
1222 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1223 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001224 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001225 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001226 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1227 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1228 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001229 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1230 * data block:
1231 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1232 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1233 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001234 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1235 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001236 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001237struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001238 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001239 u8 icv_len;
1240 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001241 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001242 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001243 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001244 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001245 u8 key[0];
1246};
1247
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001248/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001249 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1250 *
1251 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1252 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1253 *
1254 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1255 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1256 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1257 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1258 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1259 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1260 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1261 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1262 * key_idx value calculation:
1263 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1264 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1265 */
1266struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1267 u32 cipher;
1268 u16 iftype;
1269 u8 hdr_len;
1270 u8 pn_len;
1271 u8 pn_off;
1272 u8 key_idx_off;
1273 u8 key_idx_mask;
1274 u8 key_idx_shift;
1275 u8 mic_len;
1276};
1277
1278/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001279 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1280 *
1281 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1282 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1283 *
1284 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1285 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1286 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001287enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001288 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001289};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001290
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001291/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001292 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1293 *
1294 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1295 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1296 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1297 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1298 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1299 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1300 */
1301enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1302 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1303 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1304 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1305 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1306 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1307 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1308};
1309
1310/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001311 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1312 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1313 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1314 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1315 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1316 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1317 *
1318 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1319 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1320 */
1321enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1322 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1323 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1324 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1325 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1326};
1327
1328/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001329 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1330 *
1331 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001332 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001333 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1334 */
1335struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1336 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1337 struct {
1338 s8 idx;
1339 u8 count;
1340 u8 count_cts;
1341 u8 count_rts;
1342 u16 flags;
1343 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1344};
1345
1346/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001347 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1348 *
1349 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1350 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1351 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1352 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1353 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001354 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001355 *
1356 * @addr: MAC address
1357 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001358 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001359 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1360 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001361 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports WME. Only valid during AP-mode.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001362 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1363 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001364 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1365 * if wme is supported.
1366 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001367 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001368 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1369 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1370 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1371 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001372 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001373 * @rates: rate control selection table
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001374 */
1375struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001376 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001377 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1378 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001379 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001380 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001381 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001382 u8 uapsd_queues;
1383 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001384 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001385 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001386 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001387 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001388
1389 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001390 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001391};
1392
1393/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001394 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1395 *
1396 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301397 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001398 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001399 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1400 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1401 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001402enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001403 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1404};
1405
1406/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001407 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1408 *
1409 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1410 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1411 */
1412struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1413 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1414};
1415
1416/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001417 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1418 *
1419 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1420 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1421 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1422 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1423 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1424 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001425 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1426 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1427 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1428 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1429 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1430 * algorithm.
1431 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1432 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1433 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1434 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1435 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1436 * CCK frames.
1437 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001438 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1439 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1440 * the FCS at the end.
1441 *
1442 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1443 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1444 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1445 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1446 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1447 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001448 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001449 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001450 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1451 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1452 *
1453 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1454 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1455 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001456 *
1457 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1458 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1459 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1460 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1461 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001462 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1463 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1464 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1465 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1466 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001467 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1468 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1469 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301470 *
1471 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1472 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001473 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001474 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1475 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1476 *
1477 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1478 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1479 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1480 *
1481 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1482 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001483 *
1484 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1485 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001486 *
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001487 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS:
1488 * Hardware supports static spatial multiplexing powersave,
1489 * ie. can turn off all but one chain even on HT connections
1490 * that should be using more chains.
1491 *
1492 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS:
1493 * Hardware supports dynamic spatial multiplexing powersave,
1494 * ie. can turn off all but one chain and then wake the rest
1495 * up as required after, for example, rts/cts handshake.
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001496 *
1497 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1498 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1499 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1500 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301501 *
1502 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1503 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1504 * the stack.
1505 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001506 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001507 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1508 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
1509 * When this flag is set, signaling beacon-loss will cause an immediate
1510 * change to disassociated state.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001511 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001512 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1513 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1514 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001515 *
1516 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1517 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1518 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1519 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1520 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1521 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001522 *
1523 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1524 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1525 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1526 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1527 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1528 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001529 *
1530 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1531 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1532 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001533 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001534 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1535 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1536 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001537 *
1538 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1539 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1540 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1541 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001542 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001543 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1544 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1545 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001546 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1547 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1548 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001549 *
1550 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1551 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001552 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001553 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1554 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1555 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1556 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001557 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1558 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1559 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1560 * CSA frame.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001561 */
1562enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001563 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001564 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1565 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001566 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1567 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001568 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001569 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001570 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001571 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1572 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1573 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1574 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1575 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1576 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001577 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001578 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_STATIC_SMPS = 1<<15,
1579 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_SMPS = 1<<16,
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001580 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301581 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001582 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001583 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001584 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001585 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001586 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001587 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001588 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001589 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001590 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001591 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001592};
1593
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001594/**
1595 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001596 *
1597 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1598 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1599 *
1600 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1601 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1602 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001603 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1604 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001605 *
1606 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1607 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001608 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1609 * along with this structure.
1610 *
1611 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1612 *
1613 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1614 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1615 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001616 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1617 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
1618 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001619 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001620 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001621 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001622 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001623 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001624 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001625 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001626 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1627 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1628 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001629 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1630 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1631 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001632 *
1633 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1634 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001635 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1636 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001637 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1638 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001639 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001640 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1641 * can handle.
1642 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1643 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001644 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001645 *
1646 * @napi_weight: weight used for NAPI polling. You must specify an
1647 * appropriate value here if a napi_poll operation is provided
1648 * by your driver.
Randy Dunlap858022a2011-03-18 09:33:02 -07001649 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001650 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1651 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1652 * aggregation.
1653 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1654 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1655 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001656 *
1657 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1658 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1659 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001660 *
1661 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1662 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001663 *
1664 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1665 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1666 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1667 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001668 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001669 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1670 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1671 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1672 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001673 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1674 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1675 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001676 *
1677 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1678 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1679 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1680 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1681 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1682 * neither enabled.
1683 *
1684 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1685 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1686 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001687 *
1688 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1689 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1690 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001691 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001692struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001693 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001694 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001695 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001696 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001697 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001698 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001699 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001700 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001701 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001702 int chanctx_data_size;
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001703 int napi_weight;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001704 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001705 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001706 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001707 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001708 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001709 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001710 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001711 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001712 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001713 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001714 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001715 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001716 u8 uapsd_queues;
1717 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001718 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1719 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001720};
1721
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001722/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001723 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1724 *
1725 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1726 *
1727 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1728 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1729 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1730 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1731 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001732 *
1733 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001734 */
1735struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1736
1737/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001738 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1739 *
1740 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1741 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1742 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001743static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1744{
1745 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1746}
1747
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001748/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001749 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001750 *
1751 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1752 * @addr: the address to set
1753 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001754static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1755{
1756 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1757}
1758
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001759static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1760ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001761 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001762{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001763 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001764 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001765 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001766}
1767
1768static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1769ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001770 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001771{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001772 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001773 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001774 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001775}
1776
1777static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1778ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001779 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001780{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001781 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001782 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001783 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001784}
1785
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001786/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001787 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1788 * @hw: the hardware
1789 * @skb: the skb
1790 *
1791 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1792 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1793 */
1794void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1795
1796/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001797 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001798 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001799 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1800 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1801 *
1802 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1803 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001804 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1805 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1806 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001807 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1808 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1809 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001810 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1811 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1812 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1813 *
1814 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1815 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1816 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1817 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1818 *
1819 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1820 *
1821 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1822 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1823 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1824 * based on the receive flags.
1825 *
1826 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1827 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1828 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1829 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001830 *
1831 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1832 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1833 * handler.
1834 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001835 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001836 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1837 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001838 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001839 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001840 *
1841 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1842 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1843 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001844 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001845
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001846/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001847 * DOC: Powersave support
1848 *
1849 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1850 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001851 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1852 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1853 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1854 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1855 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1856 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1857 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1858 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001859 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001860 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1861 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1862 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001863 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1864 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001865 *
1866 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1867 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1868 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001869 *
1870 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1871 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1872 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1873 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001874 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1875 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001876 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001877 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001878 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1879 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1880 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1881 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1882 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1883 * periods.
1884 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001885 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001886 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1887 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1888 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1889 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1890 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1891 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1892 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1893 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1894 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1895 *
1896 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1897 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
1898 * uapsd paramater in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
1899 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1900 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1901 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1902 *
1903 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1904 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001905 */
1906
1907/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001908 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1909 *
1910 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08001911 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001912 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1913 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1914 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1915 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1916 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1917 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001918 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1919 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001920 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1921 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1922 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1923 *
1924 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1925 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1926 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1927 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1928 *
1929 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1930 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1931 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
1932 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
1933 * - a list of information element IDs
1934 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
1935 *
1936 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
1937 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
1938 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
1939 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
1940 * vendor information elements.
1941 *
1942 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
1943 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
1944 *
1945 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
1946 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
1947 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
1948 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
1949 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
1950 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
1951 *
1952 *
1953 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
1954 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
1955 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
1956 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
1957 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
1958 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
1959 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
1960 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
1961 *
1962 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
1963 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
1964 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001965 */
1966
1967/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001968 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
1969 *
1970 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
1971 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
1972 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
1973 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
1974 *
1975 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
1976 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
1977 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
1978 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
1979 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
1980 * hardware flags.
1981 *
1982 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
1983 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
1984 * turned off otherwise.
1985 *
1986 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
1987 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
1988 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
1989 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
1990 */
1991
1992/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001993 * DOC: Frame filtering
1994 *
1995 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
1996 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
1997 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
1998 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
1999 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2000 *
2001 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2002 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2003 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2004 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002005 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2006 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2007 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2008 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2009 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2010 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2011 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002012 *
2013 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2014 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2015 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2016 * or dropped.
2017 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002018 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2019 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2020 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2021 * the flag, but not clear it.
2022 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2023 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2024 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2025 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2026 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2027 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2028 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2029 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002030 */
2031
2032/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002033 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2034 *
2035 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2036 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2037 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2038 *
2039 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2040 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2041 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2042 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2043 * the driver code.
2044 *
2045 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2046 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2047 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2048 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2049 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2050 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2051 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2052 *
2053 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2054 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2055 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2056 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2057 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2058 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2059 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2060 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2061 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2062 * @sta_notify callback.
2063 *
2064 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2065 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2066 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2067 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2068 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2069 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2070 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002071 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002072 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2073 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2074 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2075 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2076 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2077 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2078 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002079 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2080 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2081 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002082 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2083 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2084 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2085 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2086 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2087 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2088 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2089 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2090 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2091 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2092 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2093 *
2094 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2095 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2096 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2097 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2098 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2099 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2100 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2101 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2102 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2103 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2104 * to help the @more_data paramter is passed to tell the driver if
2105 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2106 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2107 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2108 *
2109 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2110 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2111 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2112 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2113 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002114 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002115 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2116 *
2117 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2118 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2119 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2120 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002121 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002122 *
2123 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2124 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2125 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2126 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002127 */
2128
2129/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002130 * DOC: HW queue control
2131 *
2132 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2133 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2134 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2135 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2136 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2137 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2138 *
2139 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2140 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2141 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2142 *
2143 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2144 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2145 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2146 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2147 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2148 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2149 * the hardware queue.
2150 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2151 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2152 *
2153 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2154 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2155 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2156 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2157 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2158 *
2159 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2160 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2161 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2162 * off-channel queue: 9
2163 *
2164 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2165 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2166 *
2167 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2168 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2169 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2170 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2171 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2172 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2173 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2174 *
2175 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2176 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2177 *
2178 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2179 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2180 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2181 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2182 */
2183
2184/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002185 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2186 *
2187 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2188 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2189 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2190 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2191 *
2192 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2193 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2194 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2195 *
2196 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2197 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2198 * multicast address.
2199 *
2200 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2201 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2202 *
2203 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2204 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2205 *
2206 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2207 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2208 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2209 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2210 * honour this flag if possible.
2211 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002212 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002213 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002214 *
2215 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002216 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002217 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2218 * those addressed to this station.
2219 *
2220 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002221 */
2222enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2223 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2224 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2225 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2226 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2227 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2228 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2229 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002230 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002231 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002232};
2233
2234/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002235 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2236 *
2237 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2238 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002239 *
2240 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2241 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002242 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002243 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2244 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002245 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2246 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2247 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002248 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002249 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2250 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2251 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2252 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2253 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2254 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2255 * session is gone and removes the station.
2256 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2257 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2258 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2259 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002260 */
2261enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2262 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2263 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002264 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002265 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2266 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2267 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002268 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002269};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002270
2271/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002272 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2273 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002274 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2275 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002276 */
2277enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2278 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002279 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002280};
2281
2282/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002283 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2284 *
2285 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002286 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2287 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2288 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002289 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002290 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2291 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2292 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002293 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2294 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002295 */
2296enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2297 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2298 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002299 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002300 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002301};
2302
2303/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002304 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2305 *
2306 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2307 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2308 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2309 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2310 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2311 *
2312 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2313 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2314 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2315 */
2316enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2317 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2318 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2319};
2320
2321/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002322 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2323 *
2324 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2325 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2326 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2327 *
2328 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2329 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2330 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002331 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002332 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002333 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002334 *
2335 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2336 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2337 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2338 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2339 * or zero.
2340 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2341 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2342 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002343 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002344 *
2345 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2346 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2347 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2348 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002349 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2350 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002351 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002352 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002353 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2354 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2355 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2356 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2357 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002358 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2359 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2360 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2361 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002362 *
2363 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2364 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2365 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2366 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2367 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2368 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002369 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2370 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2371 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2372 * in suspend().
2373 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002374 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002375 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002376 * and @stop must be implemented.
2377 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2378 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2379 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2380 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2381 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002382 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002383 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002384 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2385 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2386 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2387 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2388 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2389 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002390 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2391 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2392 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2393 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2394 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2395 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2396 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002397 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002398 *
2399 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2400 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002401 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002402 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002403 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002404 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2405 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2406 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2407 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2408 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002409 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2410 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002411 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002412 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2413 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2414 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2415 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002416 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2417 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002418 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002419 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002420 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002421 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002422 *
2423 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002424 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2425 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002426 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002427 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002428 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002429 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002430 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2431 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2432 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002433 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002434 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002435 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2436 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2437 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2438 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2439 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2440 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002441 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2442 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2443 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2444 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002445 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002446 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002447 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2448 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002449 * that power save is disabled.
2450 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2451 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2452 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2453 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2454 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2455 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2456 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002457 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002458 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002459 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2460 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2461 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2462 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2463 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2464 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2465 * The callback can sleep.
2466 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002467 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2468 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2469 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2470 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2471 *
2472 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
2473 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002474 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2475 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002476 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002477 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002478 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2479 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2480 * this notification.
2481 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002482 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002483 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2484 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002485 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002486 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002487 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2488 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2489 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002490 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002491 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002492 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2493 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2494 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2495 * The callback can sleep.
2496 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002497 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002498 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002499 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002500 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2501 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2502 *
2503 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002504 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2505 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2506 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2507 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2508 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002509 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302510 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2511 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2512 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2513 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2514 *
2515 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2516 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2517 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002518 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002519 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2520 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2521 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002522 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002523 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2524 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2525 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2526 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002527 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2528 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2529 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2530 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2531 * The callback can sleep.
2532 *
2533 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2534 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2535 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2536 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2537 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002538 * The callback can sleep.
2539 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002540 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2541 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2542 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2543 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2544 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2545 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2546 * Must be atomic.
2547 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002548 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002549 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002550 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002551 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002552 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002553 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002554 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002555 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002556 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002557 *
2558 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002559 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002560 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002561 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002562 *
2563 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2564 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2565 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2566 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002567 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002568 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002569 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2570 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2571 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002572 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002573 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002574 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002575 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2576 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2577 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2578 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002579 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002580 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002581 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2582 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002583 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2584 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2585 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2586 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2587 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2588 * - TX: 1.....7
2589 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2590 * - TX: 8..1...
2591 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2592 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2593 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2594 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2595 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002596 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002597 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002598 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002599 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2600 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002601 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2602 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2603 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002604 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002605 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002606 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2607 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
2608 * accordingly. This callback is not required and may sleep.
2609 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002610 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2611 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002612 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002613 *
2614 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002615 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2616 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2617 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2618 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
2619 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002620 *
2621 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2622 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2623 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2624 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002625 *
2626 * @napi_poll: Poll Rx queue for incoming data frames.
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002627 *
2628 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2629 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2630 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2631 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2632 *
2633 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002634 *
2635 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2636 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2637 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2638 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2639 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2640 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002641 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002642 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2643 * must be accepted in this case.
2644 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002645 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2646 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002647 *
2648 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2649 *
2650 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302651 *
2652 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2653 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302654 *
2655 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2656 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2657 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002658 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2659 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002660 *
2661 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2662 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2663 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2664 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
2665 * Note that if the @more_data paramter is %false the driver must check
2666 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2667 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2668 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2669 * more-data bit must always be set.
2670 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2671 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002672 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2673 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2674 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2675 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2676 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2677 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002678 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2679 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2680 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002681 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2682 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002683 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002684 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002685 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002686 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2687 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2688 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002689 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002690 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2691 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2692 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2693 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002694 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002695 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002696 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2697 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2698 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002699 *
2700 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2701 *
2702 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2703 *
2704 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2705 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2706 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002707 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2708 * and can sleep.
2709 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002710 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2711 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2712 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2713 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2714 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2715 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2716 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2717 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2718 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2719 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2720 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2721 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002722 *
2723 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2724 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2725 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2726 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2727 * channel context with different settings
2728 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2729 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2730 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2731 * unbound from vif.
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002732 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2733 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2734 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2735 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2736 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2737 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2738 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002739 *
2740 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2741 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002742 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2743 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2744 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2745 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002746 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2747 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2748 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002749 *
2750 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2751 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2752 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
2753 * decremented, and when they reach zero the driver must call
2754 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2755 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
2756 * zero using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
2757 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
2758 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002759 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2760 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2761 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2762 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002763 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002764struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002765 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2766 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2767 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002768 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002769 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002770#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2771 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2772 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002773 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002774#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002775 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002776 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002777 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2778 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002779 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002780 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002781 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002782 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002783 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2784 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2785 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2786 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002787
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002788 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2789 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2790
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002791 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002792 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002793 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2794 unsigned int changed_flags,
2795 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002796 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002797 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2798 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002799 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04002801 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002802 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01002803 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2804 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2805 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2806 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002807 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2809 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002810 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02002812 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01002813 struct cfg80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002814 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2815 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002816 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2817 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2818 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
2819 struct ieee80211_sched_scan_ies *ies);
2820 void (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2821 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002822 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2823 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002824 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2825 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002826 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2827 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002828 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002829 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002830 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2831 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2832 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2833 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302834#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2835 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2837 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2838 struct dentry *dir);
2839 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2840 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2841 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2842 struct dentry *dir);
2843#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002844 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002845 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002846 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2847 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2848 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2849 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002850 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2851 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2852 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002853 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2855 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2856 u32 changed);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02002857 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02002858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002859 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03002860 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2861 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2862 u64 tsf);
2863 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002864 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002865 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01002866 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002867 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002868 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2869 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02002870 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2871 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002872 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002873 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002874#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002875 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2876 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002877 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2878 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2879 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002880#endif
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002881 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002882 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2883 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002884 int (*napi_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int budget);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09002885 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2886 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002887
2888 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02002889 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002890 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002891 int duration,
2892 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002893 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002894 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2895 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2896 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302897 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302898 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2899 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002900 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02002901 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002902 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002903
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002904 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2905 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2906 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2907 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2908 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002909 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2910 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2911 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2912 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2913 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002914
2915 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2916 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
2917 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2918 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2919 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
2920 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2921 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2922 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002923 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2924 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002925
2926 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2927 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002928
2929 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2930 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2931 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2932 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2933 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2934 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
2935 u32 changed);
2936 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2937 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2938 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
2939 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2940 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2941 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002942
2943 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002944
2945#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
2946 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2947 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2948 struct inet6_dev *idev);
2949#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002950 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2951 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2952 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002953
2954 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2955 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002956};
2957
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002958/**
2959 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
2960 *
2961 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
2962 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
2963 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
2964 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
2965 * @priv_data_len.
2966 *
2967 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
2968 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002969 *
2970 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002971 */
2972struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
2973 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops);
2974
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002975/**
2976 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
2977 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01002978 * You must call this function before any other functions in
2979 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
2980 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002981 *
2982 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002983 *
2984 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002985 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002986int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2987
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01002988/**
2989 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
2990 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
2991 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
2992 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
2993 */
2994struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
2995 int throughput;
2996 int blink_time;
2997};
2998
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01002999/**
3000 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3001 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3002 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3003 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3004 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3005 */
3006enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3007 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3008 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3009 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3010};
3011
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003012#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003013char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3014char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3015char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3016char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3017char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3018 unsigned int flags,
3019 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3020 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003021#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003022/**
3023 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3024 *
3025 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3026 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3027 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3028 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3029 *
3030 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003031 *
3032 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003033 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003034static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3035{
3036#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3037 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3038#else
3039 return NULL;
3040#endif
3041}
3042
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003043/**
3044 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3045 *
3046 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3047 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3048 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3049 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3050 *
3051 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003052 *
3053 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003054 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003055static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3056{
3057#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3058 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3059#else
3060 return NULL;
3061#endif
3062}
3063
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003064/**
3065 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3066 *
3067 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3068 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3069 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3070 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3071 *
3072 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003073 *
3074 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003075 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003076static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3077{
3078#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3079 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3080#else
3081 return NULL;
3082#endif
3083}
3084
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003085/**
3086 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3087 *
3088 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3089 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3090 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3091 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3092 *
3093 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003094 *
3095 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003096 */
3097static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3098{
3099#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3100 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3101#else
3102 return NULL;
3103#endif
3104}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003105
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003106/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003107 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3108 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003109 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003110 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3111 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3112 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003113 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3114 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3115 *
3116 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003117 */
3118static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003119ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003120 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3121 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3122{
3123#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003124 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003125 blink_table_len);
3126#else
3127 return NULL;
3128#endif
3129}
3130
3131/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003132 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3133 *
3134 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3135 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3136 *
3137 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3138 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003139void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3140
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003141/**
3142 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3143 *
3144 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3145 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003146 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003147 *
3148 * @hw: the hardware to free
3149 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003150void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3151
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003152/**
3153 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3154 *
3155 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3156 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3157 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3158 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3159 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3160 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3161 *
3162 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3163 */
3164void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3165
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003166/** ieee80211_napi_schedule - schedule NAPI poll
3167 *
3168 * Use this function to schedule NAPI polling on a device.
3169 *
3170 * @hw: the hardware to start polling
3171 */
3172void ieee80211_napi_schedule(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3173
3174/** ieee80211_napi_complete - complete NAPI polling
3175 *
3176 * Use this function to finish NAPI polling on a device.
3177 *
3178 * @hw: the hardware to stop polling
3179 */
3180void ieee80211_napi_complete(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3181
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003182/**
3183 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3184 *
3185 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003186 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3187 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3188 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3189 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003190 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003191 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003192 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3193 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003194 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3195 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003196 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003197 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003198 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003199 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3200 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003201 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003202void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003203
3204/**
3205 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3206 *
3207 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003208 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3209 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003210 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003211 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3212 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003213 *
3214 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3215 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003216 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003217void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003218
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003219/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003220 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3221 *
3222 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3223 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3224 *
3225 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003226 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3227 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003228 *
3229 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3230 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3231 */
3232static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3233 struct sk_buff *skb)
3234{
3235 local_bh_disable();
3236 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3237 local_bh_enable();
3238}
3239
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003240/**
3241 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3242 *
3243 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3244 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3245 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3246 *
3247 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3248 *
3249 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3250 * each other.
3251 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003252 * @sta: currently connected sta
3253 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003254 *
3255 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003256 */
3257int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3258
3259/**
3260 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3261 * (in process context)
3262 *
3263 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3264 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3265 * applies.
3266 *
3267 * @sta: currently connected sta
3268 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003269 *
3270 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003271 */
3272static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3273 bool start)
3274{
3275 int ret;
3276
3277 local_bh_disable();
3278 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3279 local_bh_enable();
3280
3281 return ret;
3282}
3283
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003284/*
3285 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3286 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3287 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003288#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003289
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003290/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003291 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003292 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003293 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3294 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003295 *
3296 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003297 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3298 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003299 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003300 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3301 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3302 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3303 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3304 *
3305 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3306 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3307 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3308 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3309 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3310 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3311 *
3312 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3313 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3314 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3315 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3316 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003317 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003318void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3319 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003320
3321/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003322 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3323 *
3324 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3325 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3326 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3327 *
3328 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3329 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3330 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3331 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3332 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3333 */
3334void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3335 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3336 struct sk_buff *skb,
3337 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3338 int max_rates);
3339
3340/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003341 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3342 *
3343 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3344 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3345 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3346 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003347 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3348 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003349 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003350 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3351 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003352 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003353 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3354 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003355 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003356void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003357 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003358
3359/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003360 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3361 *
3362 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3363 *
3364 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3365 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3366 * for a single hardware.
3367 *
3368 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3369 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3370 */
3371static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3372 struct sk_buff *skb)
3373{
3374 local_bh_disable();
3375 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3376 local_bh_enable();
3377}
3378
3379/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003380 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003381 *
3382 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3383 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3384 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003385 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3386 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003387 *
3388 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3389 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003390 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003391void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003392 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003393
3394/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003395 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3396 *
3397 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3398 * connected STA.
3399 *
3400 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3401 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3402 */
3403void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3404
3405/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003406 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3407 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003408 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003409 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3410 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3411 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3412 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3413 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3414 *
3415 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3416 * obtain the beacon frame/template.
3417 *
3418 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3419 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
3420 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function
3421 * before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
3422 *
3423 * If the beacon frames are generated by the device, then the driver
3424 * must use the returned beacon as the template and change the TIM IE
3425 * according to the current DTIM parameters/TIM bitmap.
3426 *
3427 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003428 *
3429 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003430 */
3431struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3433 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3434
3435/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003436 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3437 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003438 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003439 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003440 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003441 *
3442 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003443 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003444static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3445 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3446{
3447 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3448}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003449
3450/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003451 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3452 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3453 *
3454 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
3455 * announcement hit zero, this function must be called by the driver to
3456 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3457 */
3458void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3459
3460/**
3461 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached zero
3462 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3463 *
3464 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3465 */
3466bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3467
3468
3469/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003470 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3471 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3472 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3473 *
3474 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3475 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3476 *
3477 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003478 *
3479 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003480 */
3481struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3482 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3483
3484/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003485 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3486 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3487 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3488 *
3489 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3490 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3491 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3492 *
3493 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3494 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003495 *
3496 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003497 */
3498struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3500
3501/**
3502 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3503 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3504 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3505 *
3506 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3507 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3508 * BSSID and address is used.
3509 *
3510 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3511 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003512 *
3513 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003514 */
3515struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3516 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3517
3518/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003519 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3520 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3521 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3522 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3523 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003524 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003525 *
3526 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3527 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003528 *
3529 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003530 */
3531struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3532 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3533 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003534 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003535
3536/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003537 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3538 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003539 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003540 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3541 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003542 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003543 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3544 *
3545 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3546 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3547 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3548 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3549 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003550void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003551 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003552 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003553 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3554
3555/**
3556 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3557 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003558 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003559 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003560 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003561 *
3562 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3563 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3564 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003565 *
3566 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003567 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003568__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003570 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003571
3572/**
3573 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3574 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003575 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003576 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3577 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003578 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003579 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3580 *
3581 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3582 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3583 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3584 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3585 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003586void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3587 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003588 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003589 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003590 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3591
3592/**
3593 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3594 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003595 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003596 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003597 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003598 *
3599 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3600 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3601 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003602 *
3603 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003604 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003605__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3606 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003607 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003608 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003609
3610/**
3611 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3612 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003613 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003614 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003615 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003616 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003617 *
3618 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3619 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003620 *
3621 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003622 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003623__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3624 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003625 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003626 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003627 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003628
3629/**
3630 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3631 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003632 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003633 *
3634 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3635 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3636 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3637 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003638 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3639 *
3640 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3641 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003642 *
3643 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3644 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3645 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3646 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3647 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3648 * use common code for all beacons.
3649 */
3650struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003651ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003652
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003653/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003654 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3655 *
3656 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3657 *
3658 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3659 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3660 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3661 */
3662void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3663 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3664
3665/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003666 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003667 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003668 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3669 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003670 *
3671 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003672 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3673 * with this P1K
3674 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003675 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003676static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3677 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3678{
3679 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3680 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3681 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3682
3683 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3684}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003685
3686/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02003687 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3688 *
3689 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3690 * and transmitter address.
3691 *
3692 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3693 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3694 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3695 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3696 */
3697void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3698 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3699
3700/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003701 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3702 *
3703 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3704 * in the packet.
3705 *
3706 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3707 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3708 * encrypted with this key
3709 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3710 */
3711void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3712 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003713
3714/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03003715 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3716 *
3717 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3718 * previously installed master key.
3719 *
3720 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3721 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3722 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3723 */
3724void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3725 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3726
3727/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02003728 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3729 *
3730 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3731 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3732 * reverse order than in packet)
3733 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3734 * reverse order than in packet)
3735 */
3736struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3737 union {
3738 struct {
3739 u32 iv32;
3740 u16 iv16;
3741 } tkip;
3742 struct {
3743 u8 pn[6];
3744 } ccmp;
3745 struct {
3746 u8 pn[6];
3747 } aes_cmac;
3748 };
3749};
3750
3751/**
3752 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3753 *
3754 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3755 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3756 *
3757 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3758 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3759 * offloaded to the device.
3760 *
3761 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3762 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3763 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3764 */
3765void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3766 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3767
3768/**
3769 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3770 *
3771 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3772 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3773 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3774 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3775 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3776 *
3777 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3778 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3779 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3780 *
3781 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3782 * can be done concurrently.
3783 */
3784void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3785 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3786
3787/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02003788 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3789 *
3790 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3791 * @seq: new sequence data
3792 *
3793 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3794 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3795 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3796 * ARP requests.
3797 *
3798 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3799 * can be done concurrently.
3800 */
3801void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3802 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3803
3804/**
3805 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3806 *
3807 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3808 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3809 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3810 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3811 * @seq: new sequence data
3812 *
3813 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
3814 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
3815 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
3816 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
3817 *
3818 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3819 * can be done concurrently.
3820 */
3821void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3822 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3823
3824/**
3825 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
3826 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3827 *
3828 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
3829 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
3830 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
3831 *
3832 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
3833 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
3834 */
3835void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3836
3837/**
3838 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
3839 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
3840 * @keyconf: new key data
3841 *
3842 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
3843 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
3844 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
3845 *
3846 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
3847 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
3848 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
3849 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
3850 *
3851 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
3852 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
3853 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
3854 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
3855 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
3856 * of the reconfiguration.
3857 *
3858 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
3859 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
3860 *
3861 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
3862 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
3863 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
3864 * the key that's being replaced.
3865 */
3866struct ieee80211_key_conf *
3867ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3869
3870/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003871 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
3872 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
3873 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
3874 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
3875 * @gfp: allocation flags
3876 */
3877void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
3878 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
3879
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003880/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003881 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
3882 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3883 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3884 *
3885 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3886 */
3887void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3888
3889/**
3890 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
3891 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3892 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3893 *
3894 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3895 */
3896void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3897
3898/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003899 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
3900 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3901 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
3902 *
3903 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003904 *
3905 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03003906 */
3907
3908int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
3909
3910/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003911 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
3912 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3913 *
3914 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
3915 */
3916void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3917
3918/**
3919 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
3920 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3921 *
3922 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
3923 */
3924void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3925
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003926/**
3927 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
3928 *
3929 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
3930 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02003931 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
3932 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003933 *
3934 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003935 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003936 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01003937void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003938
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003939/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003940 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
3941 *
3942 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
3943 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
3944 *
3945 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3946 */
3947void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3948
3949/**
3950 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
3951 *
3952 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
3953 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
3954 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
3955 * while associating, for instance.
3956 *
3957 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
3958 */
3959void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3960
3961/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003962 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
3963 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
3964 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
3965 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
3966 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
3967 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3968 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
3969 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
3970 */
3971enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
3972 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
3973 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
3974};
3975
3976/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003977 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003978 *
3979 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
3980 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003981 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
3982 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
3983 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003984 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003985 *
3986 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003987 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003988 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003989 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
3990 */
3991void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01003992 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003993 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003994 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01003995 void *data);
3996
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003997/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02003998 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
3999 *
4000 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4001 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4002 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4003 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004004 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004005 *
4006 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004007 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004008 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4009 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4010 */
4011void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004012 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004013 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4014 u8 *mac,
4015 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4016 void *data);
4017
4018/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004019 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4020 *
4021 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4022 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4023 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4024 *
4025 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4026 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4027 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4028 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4029 */
4030void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031 u32 iter_flags,
4032 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4033 u8 *mac,
4034 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4035 void *data);
4036
4037/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004038 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4039 *
4040 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4041 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4042 *
4043 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4044 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4045 */
4046void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4047
4048/**
4049 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4050 *
4051 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4052 * workqueue.
4053 *
4054 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4055 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4056 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4057 */
4058void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4059 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4060 unsigned long delay);
4061
4062/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004063 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004064 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004065 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304066 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004067 *
4068 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004069 *
4070 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4071 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4072 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4073 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304074int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4075 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004076
4077/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004078 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004079 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004080 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4081 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4082 *
4083 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004084 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4085 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004086 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004087void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004088 u16 tid);
4089
4090/**
4091 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004092 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004093 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004094 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004095 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004096 *
4097 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4098 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4099 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4100 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004101int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004102
4103/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004104 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004105 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004106 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4107 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4108 *
4109 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004110 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4111 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004112 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004113void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004114 u16 tid);
4115
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004116/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004117 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4118 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004119 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004120 * @addr: station's address
4121 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004122 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4123 *
4124 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004125 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4126 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004127struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004128 const u8 *addr);
4129
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004130/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004131 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004132 *
4133 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004134 * @addr: remote station's address
4135 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004136 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004137 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4138 *
4139 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004140 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4141 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004142 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4143 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4144 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4145 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4146 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4147 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4148 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004149 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004150 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004151 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004152struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4153 const u8 *addr,
4154 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004155
4156/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004157 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4158 * @hw: the hardware
4159 * @pubsta: the station
4160 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4161 *
4162 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4163 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4164 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4165 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4166 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4167 *
4168 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4169 * manner.
4170 *
4171 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4172 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4173 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4174 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4175 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4176 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4177 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4178 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4179 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4180 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4181 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4182 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4183 * woke up while blocked or not.
4184 */
4185void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4186 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4187
4188/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004189 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4190 * @pubsta: the station
4191 *
4192 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4193 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4194 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4195 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4196 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004197 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4198 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4199 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4200 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4201 *
4202 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4203 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4204 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4205 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004206 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004207void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004208
4209/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004210 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4211 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4212 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4213 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4214 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4215 *
4216 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4217 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4218 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4219 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4220 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4221 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004222 *
4223 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4224 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4225 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004226 */
4227void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4228 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4229 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4230 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4231 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4232 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4233 void *data),
4234 void *iter_data);
4235
4236/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004237 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4238 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4239 * @iter: iterator function
4240 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4241 *
4242 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4243 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4244 * places while calling into the driver.
4245 *
4246 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4247 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4248 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004249 *
4250 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4251 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4252 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4253 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004254 */
4255void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4256 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4257 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4258 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4259 void *data),
4260 void *iter_data);
4261
4262/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004263 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4264 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4265 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4266 *
4267 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4268 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4269 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4270 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4271 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004272 * %NULL.
4273 *
4274 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004275 */
4276struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4277 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4278
4279/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004280 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4281 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004282 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004283 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004284 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004285 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004286 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4287 */
4288void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004289
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004290/**
4291 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4292 *
4293 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4294 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004295 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004296 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4297 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004298 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4299 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004300 *
4301 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4302 * without connection recovery attempts.
4303 */
4304void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4305
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004306/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004307 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4308 *
4309 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4310 *
4311 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4312 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4313 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4314 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4315 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4316 *
4317 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4318 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4319 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4320 * disconnect normally later.
4321 *
4322 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4323 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4324 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4325 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4326 */
4327void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4328
4329/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004330 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4331 * rssi threshold triggered
4332 *
4333 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4334 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4335 * @gfp: context flags
4336 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004337 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004338 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4339 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4340 */
4341void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4342 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4343 gfp_t gfp);
4344
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004345/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004346 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4347 *
4348 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4349 */
4350void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4351
4352/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004353 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4354 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4355 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4356 *
4357 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4358 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4359 */
4360void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4361
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004362/**
4363 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4364 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004365 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004366 *
4367 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4368 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4369 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4370 */
4371void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4372 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4373
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004374/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004375 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4376 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4377 */
4378void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4379
4380/**
4381 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4382 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4383 */
4384void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4385
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004386/**
4387 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4388 *
4389 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4390 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4391 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4392 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4393 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4394 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4395 *
4396 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4397 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4398 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4399 */
4400void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4401 const u8 *addr);
4402
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004403/**
4404 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4405 *
4406 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4407 * buffer.
4408 *
4409 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4410 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4411 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4412 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4413 */
4414void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4415
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004416/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004417
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004418/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004419 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004420 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004421 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4422 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4423 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004424 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4425 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004426 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4427 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4428 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4429 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4430 * RTS threshold
4431 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4432 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004433 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004434 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4435 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004436 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004437 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004438 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004439 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004440struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4441 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4442 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4443 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4444 struct sk_buff *skb;
4445 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4446 bool rts, short_preamble;
4447 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004448 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004449 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004450 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004451};
4452
4453struct rate_control_ops {
4454 struct module *module;
4455 const char *name;
4456 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004457 void (*free)(void *priv);
4458
4459 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4460 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004461 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004462 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304463 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004464 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004465 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4466 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004467 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4468 void *priv_sta);
4469
4470 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4471 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4472 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004473 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4474 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004475
4476 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4477 struct dentry *dir);
4478 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
4479};
4480
4481static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4482 enum ieee80211_band band,
4483 int index)
4484{
4485 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4486}
4487
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004488/**
4489 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4490 *
4491 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4492 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4493 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4494 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4495 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4496 * not null.
4497 *
4498 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4499 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4500 *
4501 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4502 * that this may be null.
4503 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4504 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4505 */
4506bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4507 void *priv_sta,
4508 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4509
4510
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004511static inline s8
4512rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4513 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4514{
4515 int i;
4516
4517 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4518 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4519 return i;
4520
4521 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004522 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004523
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004524 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004525 return 0;
4526}
4527
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004528static inline
4529bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4530 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4531{
4532 unsigned int i;
4533
4534 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4535 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4536 return true;
4537 return false;
4538}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004539
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004540/**
4541 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4542 *
4543 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4544 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4545 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4546 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4547 *
4548 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4549 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4550 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4551 */
4552int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4553 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4554 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4555
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004556int ieee80211_rate_control_register(struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4557void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4558
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004559static inline bool
4560conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4561{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004562 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004563}
4564
4565static inline bool
4566conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4567{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004568 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4569 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004570}
4571
4572static inline bool
4573conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4574{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004575 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4576 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004577}
4578
4579static inline bool
4580conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4581{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004582 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004583}
4584
4585static inline bool
4586conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4587{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004588 return conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004589}
4590
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004591static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4592ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4593{
4594 if (p2p) {
4595 switch (type) {
4596 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4597 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4598 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4599 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4600 default:
4601 break;
4602 }
4603 }
4604 return type;
4605}
4606
4607static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4608ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4609{
4610 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4611}
4612
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004613void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4614 int rssi_min_thold,
4615 int rssi_max_thold);
4616
4617void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004618
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004619/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004620 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004621 *
4622 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4623 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004624 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4625 *
4626 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4627 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004628 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004629int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4630
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004631/**
4632 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4633 * @vif: virtual interface
4634 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4635 * @gfp: allocation flags
4636 *
4637 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4638 */
4639void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4640 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4641 gfp_t gfp);
4642
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02004643/**
4644 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
4645 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4646 * @vif: virtual interface
4647 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
4648 * @band: the band to transmit on
4649 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
4650 *
4651 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
4652 */
4653bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4654 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
4655 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
4656
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01004657/**
4658 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
4659 *
4660 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
4661 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
4662 *
4663 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
4664 *
4665 * private:
4666 *
4667 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
4668 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
4669 */
4670struct ieee80211_noa_data {
4671 u32 next_tsf;
4672 bool has_next_tsf;
4673
4674 u8 absent;
4675
4676 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4677 struct {
4678 u32 start;
4679 u32 duration;
4680 u32 interval;
4681 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4682};
4683
4684/**
4685 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
4686 *
4687 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
4688 * @data: NoA tracking data
4689 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4690 *
4691 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
4692 */
4693int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
4694 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4695
4696/**
4697 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
4698 *
4699 * @data: NoA tracking data
4700 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4701 */
4702void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4703
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004704#endif /* MAC80211_H */